Cooper Lighting 214T5 Indoor Furnishings User Manual

2010
OWNER’ S MANUAL
Charger
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
VIN Location
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Trunk Lock And Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 24
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 48
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 49
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 58
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 77
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the ON position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— LOCK
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON
— START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
15
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the
when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
position.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
SENTRY KEY姞
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho- seconds.
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
or unlocked.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, always
remember to place the ignition in OFF.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Replacement Keys
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authovehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthe authorized dealer.
thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
Customer Key Programming
Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
starting and provide the following audible and visible
performed at an authorized dealer.
signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park lamps
General Information
and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Rearming of the System
subject to the following conditions:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
• This device must accept any interference that may be
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
received, including interference that may cause undesrearm itself.
ired operation.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm the System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In
addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after
closing the door, you must repeat one of the previouslydescribed arming sequences.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
To Disarm the System
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter of the previously-described arming sequences has ocor insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
turn the key to the ON position.
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or unlock any
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
door.
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
Tamper Alert
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you lights are turned on manually.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Key Fob removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
security alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm.
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal
Settings
(CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Key Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the to deactivate the security alarm.
following procedure:
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
Information Center (EVIC — If Equipped)/Personal Set- • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underfollowing procedure:
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transTo Lock the Doors
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 secPress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the LOCK button.
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
removed.
proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecits previous setting.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal
Settings
(Customer- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
strument Panel” for further information.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated NOTE:
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button • The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
to deactivate the security alarm.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
To Unlatch the Trunk
horn will remain on.
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Using the Panic Alarm
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
by the system.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the Programming Additional Transmitters
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
NOTE:
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the RKE transmitter. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver
into the slot and gently pry open the access door.
Battery Replacement
1— Battery Access Door
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
opening and snap into place.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while
• This device must accept any interference received,
still maintaining security. The system has a
including interference that may cause undesired
range
of
approximately
300 ft (91 m).
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- NOTE:
proved by the party responsible for compliance could • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
distance, check for these two conditions:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
27
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
in the Remote Start mode.
switch to the RUN position.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, NOTE:
the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position • The ignition switch must be in the RUN position in
order to drive the vehicle.
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Vehicle
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
the Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Turn To
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Run” will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
to run.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
29
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. RemovPower Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition,
and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
Power Door Lock Switch
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key 6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from transmitter.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or programming.
disabled as follows:
5. Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle for the feature to be enabled or disabled.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
its previous setting.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws.
mation.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
following procedure:
power door locks if:
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enswitch.
abled.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
position (do not start the engine).
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors. 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The driver door is opened.
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position (do not start the engine).
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
doors.
enabled or disabled as follows:
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecprogramming.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal
Settings
(Customer- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- its previous setting.
strument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the in accordance with local laws.
following procedure:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
into the child lock control and pull it upward.
NOTE: For emergency key information, refer to “A
Word About Your Keys”.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
into the child lock control and pull it downward.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
2
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or RUN position.
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
To open the window part way, press the window switch NOTE:
to the first detent and release it when you want the • If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
window to stop.
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
To stop the window from going all the way down during
switch again to close the window.
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoEquipped
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
Reset
Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead,
the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the
AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after
vehicle power is restored:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com- NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an button will operate.
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Wind Buffeting
TRUNK button on the Remote
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
twice within five seconds.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Trunk Release
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
Button
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
With the ignition switch in the RUN position, the Trunk
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by will reappear once the trunk is closed.
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key Trunk Emergency Release
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym- The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
vehicle are the restraint systems:
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
all passengers
(LATCH).
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenNOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
ger
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window collision.
— if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
wheel
possible.
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
43
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack from Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
47
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
position the belt away from your neck.
Equipped
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUse the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combina1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
tion lap/shoulder belt.
anchor point.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
49
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
the entire belt is extracted.
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will worn snugly and positioned properly.
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Renow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
(BeltAlert姞)
locking mode.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warning system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following procedure:
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success- Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
fully completed the programming.
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exlong as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
tender and store it.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Front Airbag Components
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 1 — Airbags
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the 2 — Knee Bolsters
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. regulations for Advanced Airbags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
53
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator NOTE:
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
Airbag System Components
seat position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front system components:
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • Airbag Warning Light
Advanced Front Airbags.
• Steering Wheel and Column
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
• Instrument Panel
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win- • Knee Impact Bolster
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
are located above the side windows and their covers are
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the airbag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
55
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
2
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain airbag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
57
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance”.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and
type of impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
59
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal away from an inflating airbag.
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
START or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position,
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruThe Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
also record the nature of the malfunction.
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
Front and Side Impact Sensors
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
•
•
•
•
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
Cut off fuel to the engine.
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
until the ignition key is turned off.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
removed.
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Unlock the doors automatically.
immediately.
If a Deployment Occurs
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate Maintaining Your Airbag System
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
WARNING!
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inbe injured if the airbag system is not there to
structions for cleaning.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have dewiring, including adding any kind of badges or
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
WARNING!
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
(Continued)
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the approximate six to eight-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either highspeed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
65
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Pedal position
• And other parameters
configuration
67
WARNING!
depending
on
vehicle
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
children from newborn size to the child almost large
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
the rear seats rather than in the front.
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
CHildren)”.
as possible.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
slouching can move the belt out of position.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belttheir back.
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. CanaChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s webcomfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
over the front of the seat when their back is against the roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
71
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
73
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardare provided with the child restraint system.
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
surfaces.
seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
behind each rear seating position located in the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorpanel between the rear seatback and the rear
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
window. These tether strap anchorages are
most direct path between the anchor and the child
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or removing slack in the straps according to the child
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”. A locking clip
should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
the retractor.
75
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VePets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interDrive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). preted as an indication of difficulty.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
SAFETY TIPS
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Transporting Passengers
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
AREA.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
79
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate Vehicle
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
Seat Belts
use the recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or retractor condition, replace the belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Airbag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
81
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 90
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 88
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 134
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Power Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . 127
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 131
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 136
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
85
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . .
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
. . . . . 149
. . . . . 150
. . . . 153
. . . . . 153
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
87
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
89
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Power Mirror Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
91
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- • or call 1–877–855–8400
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to conUconnect™ Phone Button
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
buttons
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
(Voice Command button) that will enthe vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
able
you
to
access
the system.
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be Voice Command Button
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
Actual button location may vary with the raEnglish, Spanish, or French languages.
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
93
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
prompt.
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
switch), if so equipped.
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
button on the radio control head.
press of the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
95
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
pairing instructions:
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
• Press the
button to begin.
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal IdentiUconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular • Press the
button to begin.
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
⬙Dial.⬙
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say •
“Call.⬙
•
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
Press the
button to begin.
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
main menu.
Name” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected celluBluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonelar phone is accessible.
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded. Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
book.
these entries from your phone.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or NOTE:
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be • The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transtransfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
phone connection.
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
entry that you wish to edit.
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
phonebook entry that you are editing.
will only use the first 24 characters.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
• Press the
button to begin.
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say feature.
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language • The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
is deleted.
number designation you wish to call.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
Phone Call Features
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
button to begin.
• Press the
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
your cellular service provider for the features that you
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phoneAnswer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
book entries, if available.
Currently in Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
button during the playing of the desired name, and Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio syssay ⬙Call.⬙
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ call. Press the
operations at this point.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
rejected.
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
button until you hear
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for To put a call on hold, press the
call waiting that you normally hear when using your a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
button to place the current bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
cellular phone. Press the
button until you hear a single beep.
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
press the
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
103
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
the language selection.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duravoice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone• An active call is automatically transferred to the
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagecellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
specific and usable across all languages.
OFF.
Emergency Assistance
Uconnect™ Phone Features
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
using:
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
some systems. To do this, press the
follows:
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• Press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
for the cellular phone directly.
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency numWARNING!
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
Uconnect™ Phone System to allow use of this vehicle
NOTE:
feature in emergency situations, when the cellular
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
phone has network coverage and stays paired to the
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Uconnect™ Phone System.
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
Towing Assistance
and area.
If you need towing assistance:
button to begin.
• Press the
button to begin.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
service or automated customer service line. Some serbutton and
some systems. To do this, press the
vices require immediate response selection. In some
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying
press the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
107
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone.
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
will be given the choice to change it.
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
Phone and Network Status Indicators
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by may feel that the call did not go through even though the
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
notification to inform you of your phone and network hear the audio.
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming, Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
button.
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
109
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone List Paired Cellular Phone Names
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
button to begin.
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the • Press the
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
priority phone present in or near (approximately
button and
phone being announced, press the
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
paired phone.
button to begin.
• Press the
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• Press the
button to begin.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
• You can also press the
button at any time while
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
• You can also press the
button at any time while
wish to delete.
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
111
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Command
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
radio mode):
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press the
button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙ command.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
117
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
119
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
seconds, the system will present you with a list of listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
button, listen a normal speaking volume.
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton while the dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system set to low.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
change commands. This will become helpful once you commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
start to learn the options.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
Changing the Volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
button.
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
menu.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
123
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
System Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English”
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Language French”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
• “Language Spanish”
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS
button first and wait for the beep Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
Command
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
operation of the vehicle.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogWARNING!
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
and will improve recognition.
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seats — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
125
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the
driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward or to
recline the seatback. The passenger’s seat will move up or
down, forward or rearward.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Use the recline control to adjust the forward or rearward
position of the seatback.
Power Seat Recline Switch
127
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
129
3
Adjustable Head Restraint
Removing Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint to its highest position, push in both buttons at
the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously
pull up on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods
into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest
until the head restraint reaches the first lock position,
push the large button in and push down and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
facing toward the front of the vehicle.
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If High-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the Low-level after approximately
30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of indicators illuminated changes from two to
one, indicating the change. Operation on the Low-level
Heated Seats — If Equipped
setting also turns off automatically after approximately
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
30 minutes.
The controls for each front seat are located near the
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
bottom center of the instrument panel.
within two to five minutes.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to
the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
On some models, the rear seatbacks can be folded
forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the
loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the seat.
131
Folding Rear Seats
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the Two latches must be released to open the hood.
seatback above the seat strap.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
133
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
135
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your further information.
vehicle in an unlit area.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the
headlights are off and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Lights-On Reminder
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
when the driver’s door is opened.
steering column.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
139
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and, if so equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets
and cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
Dimmer Control
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
The dimmer control is part of the doors are open.
headlight switch and is located on the
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
left side of the instrument panel. With
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
the parking lights or headlights on,
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
rotating the dimmer control upward
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. The lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between
cycles.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
141
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for Mist Feature
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
wipers will continue to operate until you release the
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
lever.
and then turn off.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with
the steering column.
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The “Headlights On with Wipers” feature can be turned
on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
column in position, push the control handle inward until driver’s seat cushion side shield.
fully engaged.
WARNING!
3
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the transmission
is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is
on.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the rightside of the steering wheel, operates the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button, located on the end
of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the
speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push
and release the ON/OFF button again. The system and
the indicator light will turn off.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
reaches the speed desired, push the lever downward to
SET DECEL and release. Remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE:
• Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
equipped).
• Press the brake pedal.
• Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you
(CANCEL).
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the
from the accelerator pedal.
compact spare tire.
To Vary the Speed Setting
To Deactivate
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inThe system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
erasing the memory if you:
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
• Softly tap the brake pedal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to To Accelerate For Passing
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so
tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever
in SET DECEL. Release the Electronic Speed Control
lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set
speed will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
Overhead Console
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Courtesy/Reading
Lights
Opener (HomeLink威) buttons and power sunroof switch
may also be included, if equipped.
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desigtransmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
HomeLink威 Buttons
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secubattery.
rity Alarm is active.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
display in view.
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand- 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINuntil the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # ING” repeat Step 3.
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans- garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
mitter buttons.
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
garage door may open and close while you train.
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
153
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
door or gate motor.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, used at any time.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
• Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security
to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
in your vehicle.
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Controls
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent”, which operates regardless
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
157
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
the glass panel.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
a fuse.
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
NOTE:
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door
element must be used.
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
need to be replaced.
information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the power available only when the ignition is in the ON or
sunroof is fully closed.
ACC positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
3
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
Center Console Power Outlet
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
3
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Front Seat Cupholders
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins
with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles
not equipped with navigation radio, the console also
contains an extra storage bin located below the climate
control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
Rear Seat Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
163
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and
right side of the top compartment provides clearance for
power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the
lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s,
cellular phones, or other electrical equipment. The console’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these
compartments.
1 — Release button for bottom compartment
2 — Release button for top compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the
armrest down.)
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
165
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 202
▫ Clock Setting Procedure —
RER/REN Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 215
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 206
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 206
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 225
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5 —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 214
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . 232
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
169
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) – If Equipped .
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/RER/RES Radios Only) . . . . 236 䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 236 䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 240
. 242
. 244
. 246
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 246
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Hazard Switch
4 — Electronic Stability Program OFF Button* /
Traction Control System OFF Button*
5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Radio
7 — Climate Control
8 — Heated Seat Switch*
9 — Power Outlet
10 — Ash Tray*
11 — Storage Compartment*
12 — Ignition Switch
13 — Hood Release
14 — Trunk Release Button
15 — Headlight Switch
* If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
171
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
173
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles (km). A
second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Trip Odometer Button
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
Premium Cluster
This light will turn on when the electronic
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
speed control is on.
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
5. Tachometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
reset it.
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
Base Cluster
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
The word ⬙Trip⬙ will appear when this button is pressed. area.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
8. Temperature Gauge
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperalight will also turn on while the engine is
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
running if there is a problem with the Electhe engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
175
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, turns on while driving, or stays on,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on when the key in the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The light should go out with the engine running. The
system will turn this light on continuously while the
engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the
ESP or the BAS or both.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in accident.
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
177
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
15. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt
Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check
or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
lights are on.
the odometer must be reset at zero.
17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission Only
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Area
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator
2drivE . . . . . . . . Vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
4drivE . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle is in All Wheel Drive (AWD
tCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AWD System Fault
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Lo tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
179
If the odometer displays the “tCASE” warning message
after engine start up, or during driving, the AWD system
is not functioning properly and service is required.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display SERVICE AWD SYSTEM if the system is not functioning properly and service
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving is required. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cenin a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify ter (EVIC) for further information.
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The
gASCAP
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
habits and vehicle usage.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) / All Wheel Drive (AWD)
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
Displays (Base Cluster)
On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster, the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
odometer will display “2drivE” when the vehicle is in problem continues, the message will appear the next time
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD), and “4drivE” when All Wheel the vehicle is started.
Drive (AWD) is activated.
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Lo tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles. time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
noFUSE
TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following prodamaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomcedure:
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL (Base Cluster)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
181
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
until the vehicle is disarmed.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approxishould be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
by an authorized dealer.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position.
tires.)
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
183
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the
MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK
to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
185
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Door Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more
door may be ajar.
27. Decklid Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that the
decklid may be ajar.
28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield
washer fluid is low.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
187
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
MENU Status, and Personal Settings.
• Trip computer functions
Button
• Uconnect™ hands-free communication system displays (if equipped)
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to
accept a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote
FUNCTION sound system control. Refer to “Remote
Sound System Controls”.
SELECT
• Navigation system screens (if equipped)
• Audio mode display
• Surround Sound modes (if equipped with DriverSelectable Surround [DSS])
Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
The system allows the driver to select information by
Status Messages, and Personal Settings
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Features).
The
SCROLL (Customer-Programmable
wheel.
SCROLL
button
also
functions
as
a
remote
Button
sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound
System Controls”.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode
MODE information depending on which radio is in the
Button vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound System
Controls”.
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
the following messages:
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
motion)
either turn signal on)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Low Tire Pressure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
189
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• SERVICE AWD SYSTEM — All Wheel Drive (AWD) Oil Change Required
system is not functioning properly and service is Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
required.
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec• Channel # Transmit
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
• Channel # Training
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
• Channel # Trained
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
• Clearing Channels
your personal driving style.
• Channels Cleared
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
• Did Not Train
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
• Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to “Remote Starting MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
System” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
Vehicle”)
the following procedure:
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
And Operating”)
start the engine).
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
Trip Functions
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
reset.
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
191
4
Fuel Saver Mode — On
Fuel Saver Mode — Off
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving • Distance To Empty (DTE)
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel • Trip B
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
SELECT button.
reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle • Elapsed Time
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
or START position.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will • Display Units of Measure in
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a To make your selection, press and release the FUNCsignificant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
• Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
193
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window.)
Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays — If
Equipped
Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside
temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions, when the vehicle automatically transitions from
RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following
message for five seconds.
4
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) to All Wheel Drive (AWD)
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
RWD the EVIC will display the following message for Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
five seconds.
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
• Stereo
• Video Surround
• Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes. The
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio).
All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Refer to “All Wheel Drive — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for more information on the All Wheel
Drive (AWD) system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
HOME button to display one of eight compass
HOME readings and the outside temperature.
195
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
Button
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the 2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings two seconds.
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
two seconds.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT butmessage and the last variance zone number displays in ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
the EVIC.
Turn-by-Turn Directions
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a prothe proper variance zone is selected according to the grammed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
map.
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
Navigation — If Equipped
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On, detailed operating instructions.
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
Features)
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
features when the transmission is in PARK.
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set- To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following “Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
choices.
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
“Language”
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
When in this display you may select one of five lanmake your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to “Remote Key Unlock”
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
selected language.
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lantransmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenguage selection.
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
199
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears. Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxiWhen ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make “Delay Turning Headlights Off”
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE- When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,” “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
“AWD System Displays”
When in this display you may select “ON” or “OFF”.
When ON is selected, the EVIC displays the current
mode of the transfer-case. A five second display appears
any time the transfer-case changes from All Wheel Drive
(AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or from RWD to
AWD. The EVIC also displays the current mode of the
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
transfer-case when you shift into drive or reverse. To
When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
Uconnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ 3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disuser’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downSystem (VR) — If Equipped
ward is displayed.
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
Equipped
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
downward is displayed.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
the word “Save” is displayed.
To Manually Set the Clock
Changing Daylight Savings Time
1. Turn on the radio.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
current setting:
setting menu will appear on the screen.
1. Turn on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The Changing the Time Zone
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
1. Turn on the radio.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
played to change the current setting.
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
Show Time if Radio is Off
the screen.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed 4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
as follows to change the current setting:
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
1. Turn on the radio.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” Uconnect™ gps — RER Only
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and downward is displayed.
daylight savings information is set.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
played to change the current setting.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
205
Show Time if Radio is Off
Changing the Time Zone
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
1. Turn on the radio.
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
207
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the front and rear speakers.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
209
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. MP3 Audio Play
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
NOTE:
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
DISC Button
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CAUTION!
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
211
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD file recording media and formats are limited. When
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) tions.
button works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
213
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playback of MP3 Files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
VBR bit rate.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
MPEG
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Specification Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
by the following:
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
56, 48, 40, 32
CD-R media
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
Layer 3
to load than non-multisession discs
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
215
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fearadio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
tures If Your Vehicle”.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “UnderON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
volume and to the left decreases it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- will begin to blink.
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With knob to save time change.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
and radio frequency.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Clock Setting Procedure
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ procedure, starting at Step 2.
SCROLL control knob.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
217
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
16-Digit Character
Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
219
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
to save time change.
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
221
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
(Continued) A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanTIME Button
dom Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
223
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc.
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilPressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxildren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
limited coverage in Alaska.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the System Activation
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
down.
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welPress this button to change the display to time of day. The
come kit that contains general information, including
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
ignition is OFF).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling:
mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa(Satellite) Mode
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
229
additional three seconds will make the radio display the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SETUP Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
MUSIC TYPE Button
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription.
lected.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
equipped as an option with these radios.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
231
This feature allows an iPod威 to be plugged into the Connecting The iPod姞
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the provided interface cable.
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
website for software updates.
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
• It may be necessary to remove the connector pin
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
connecting the cable.
compartment on some vehicles).
• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
• Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
not communicate with the UCI system until a miniradio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
feature to control the connected device.
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using This Feature
Play Mode
By using the provided connection cable to connect an When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
data:
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
etc.) information on the radio display.
previous track.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
playing a track, skips to the next track.
• The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
the beginning of the current track.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
233
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
the current track.
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the FF >> button.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
mode to repeat the current playing track.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
seconds.
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this
During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the
list.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
iPod威.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticed.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE control knob. This will display the next submenu list item on the iPod威 then follow the same steps
to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
235
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
237
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
Reception Quality
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
faceplate.
following reasons:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause signal blockage.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
position to operate the radio.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
SEEK Buttons
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
RW/FF
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
direction of the arrows.
without stopping until you release it.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
239
MUSIC TYPE Button
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
Sirius subscription.
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
lected.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
type.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
and press and release that button. If a button is not
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type stored into pushbutton memory.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
SETUP Button
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
following items:
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
241
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
NOTE: Dependent on the audio source, the output may
sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ includes the following components for rear seat entertainment:
• A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing.
Opening the Rear Seat VES™
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
243
• The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest • The radio and DVD player controls allow front seat
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear
seat passengers.
• A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
4
VES™ Video Screen
NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
VES™ Remote Control
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen- REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources. The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
positions.
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Remote Sound System Controls
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
The VOLUME button controls the sound
level of the sound system. Press the top of
the VOLUME button to increase the sound
VOLUME level. Press the bottom of the VOLUME
button to decrease the sound level.
Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio, meFUNCTION dia, and Universal Customer Interface
(UCI) functions (i.e., advance presets, seSELECT
lect next folder, jump to or start playing
Button
songs in playlists, etc., depending on
which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
SCROLL
MODE
Button
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
245
Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
247
Blower Control
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
The rotary knob on the left controls the
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
blower. The control has an OFF position and four speed settings. The
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
blower will remain on until the control is turned to the OFF position or
the ignition is turned OFF.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Controls
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
The rotary knob in the center controls
air temperature. Rotate the control to
the left for cooler air temperature and
to the right for warmer air temperature. Rotating the control to the extreme left provides the coldest setting.
Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting.
Mode Control
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
The rotary knob on the right controls
also directed to the front door windows through the
airflow distribution. Dots between
side window demister grilles.
each of the mode selections identify
intermediate modes that allow the op- • Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
erator to fine-tune airflow distributhe instrument panel and into the rear seating area
tion. The mode settings are as follows:
through vents under the front seats.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
can be closed to partially block airflow.
249
re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle
rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
and off. When the air conditioning is turned
• Panel
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
Air flows through the outlets located in the instruoutlets selected with the mode control. Press
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning.
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. An indicator in the button will illuminate when compresThese registers can be closed to block airflow.
sor operation is selected.
• Recirculation Control
The mode control knob also controls the recirculation feature. You can choose Bi-Level Recirculation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air
outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However,
when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Operation
The Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort
level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
251
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the recirculation control button will temporarily put the system in
Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculacomfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
tion will cause the indicator in the control button to
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any illuminate. After 10 minutes, the system will return to
time without affecting automatic operation.
normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn
off.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the air conditioning control button while NOTE:
in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the • The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
control button to flash three times and then turn off. This
debris due to the location of the climate control
indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requestsensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
ing the air conditioning is not necessary.
operation of this system.
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility.
For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
modes will cause the indicator in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,
mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred
automatic. This means the operator can override the
blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the automatic temperature control
operation chart that follows for details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
253
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Bi-Level
change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control
Air flows through the outlets located in the instruknob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
• Defrost
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
Air is directed to the windshield through the
can be closed to block airflow.
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side • Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instruwindow demister grilles.
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
• Defrost/Floor
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the • Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
side window demister grilles.
during manual operation only. When the air con• Floor
ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
flow through the outlets selected with the mode control
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air
through vents under the front seats.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
255
conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and
when manual compressor operation is selected.
then turn off.
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position. Operating Tips
• Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The Recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An indicator in the button
illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months long periods, as fogging may occur.
is not recommended because it may cause window
Outside Air Intake
fogging.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Vacation Storage
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure slush, and snow.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again. A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
Window Fogging
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear instructions.
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
257
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Normal Starting (Tip Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 269
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 265
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . 281
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS) (If
Equipped) – 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 300
261
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 301 䡵 Self-Sealing Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 315
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 308
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 309 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 327
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 334
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 348
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . 348
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
263
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availengine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
accelerator pedal.
If Engine Fails To Start
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
WARNING!
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
causing serious personal injury.
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
(Continued)
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Normal Starting (Tip Start)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
265
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
CAUTION!
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
WARNING!
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
a complete stop.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
electrocution.
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
267
• Shift lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
tomatically, dependent upon:
the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up
• Altitude
to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not
• Vehicle loading
turned to the LOCK position first.
• Driving style
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
from the ignition switch, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key fob is removed from the ignition
switch, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children inside a vehicle.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift Over-Temperature Mode
lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position.
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING
269
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response position, the ignition switch must be turned to either the
during normal operation in the DRIVE position. After the ON or START position (engine running or not) and the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal brake pedal must be pressed.
operation.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Key Ignition Park Interlock
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch located to the right of the shift lever. The override access
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever
once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
gate.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
without starting the engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab Four-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
through the access port on the center console.
Equipped
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Interlock Manual Override
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
STARTING AND OPERATING
271
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
• When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
must leave the vehicle.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
CAUTION!
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
REVERSE
This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK to the ON position.
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
273
“D” (Overdrive)
• If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
This range is used for most city and highway driving. It
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or enprovides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the
gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
best fuel economy. Select the “3” range when frequent
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy
“3” (Third)
loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmishead winds, or while towing heavy trailers).
sion will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while in
this range. The “3” position should also be used when
NOTE:
• If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into descending steep grades to prevent brake system disOverdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and tress.
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperaunder heavy operating conditions will improve perforture. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesClutch” later in this section.
sive shifting and heat buildup.
“L” (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
occur earlier than in other gear range selections.
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usuCAUTION!
ally after 1–3 miles [1.6–4.8 km] of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmisvehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
incline without applying the brakes. These practices
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever
can cause overheating and damage to the transmisinto the “3” position will show that the transmission is
sion.
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
Torque Converter Clutch
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transA feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle. A
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differnormal condition and it will not cause damage to the
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
transmission. The torque converter will refill within
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelerafive seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. This reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
275
• Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK.
• Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, then
start the engine.
• Shift into DRIVE and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
service is required.
be reset to regain all forward gears.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING
277
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK to the ON position.
REVERSE
The following indicators should be used to ensure that This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the NEUTRAL
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated. This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
must leave the vehicle.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威/
Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode to select a lower gear.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downThe transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
shifts and the best fuel economy.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
279
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
If the transmission cannot be reset, see your authorized
dealer.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
be reset to regain all forward gears. To reset the transrecur.
mission, use the following procedure:
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
1. Stop the vehicle.
as soon as possible.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with AutoStick威 or Elec3. Turn OFF the engine.
tronic Range Select (ERS) to provide greater driver con4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
trol of automatic transmission operation. Refer to
“AutoStick威” in this section.
5. Restart the engine.
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) – If Equipped
Electronic Range Select (ERS) allows the driver to limit
the highest available transmission gear, providing you
with more control of the vehicle. ERS allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during mountain
driving, trailer towing, and other situations.
ERS Operation
When the shift lever is in the Drive position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the
five available gears. Moving the shift lever to the left (D-)
will activate ERS, downshift the transmission, and display the top available gear in the instrument cluster. Once
in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (D-) or
right (D+) will change the top available gear. The transmission will not shift above the indicated gear, but will
shift up and down normally (automatically) through the
lower gears. Holding the shift lever to the left (D-) will
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible (without overspeeding the engine) for maximum engine braking. Holding the shift lever to the right (D+) for a few
seconds will disengage ERS mode.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more
control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply
STARTING AND OPERATING
move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in
the DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the
instrument cluster. In the AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is
manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift
(D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
281
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the wheels as necessary.
AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatithe accelerator pedal.
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick威 mode
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed
momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in the gage area of the vehicle display when the
transmission is first shifted into gear, and if the drive
mode changes during vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
NOTE: If the “t CASE” or “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
warning message appears after engine start up, or during (driving) wheels.
driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
283
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
285
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. Power Steering Fluid Check
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
STARTING AND OPERATING
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
287
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) (IF
EQUIPPED) – 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
289
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
short time after the stop),
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • Brake pedal pulsations, and
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
related motor noises. These noises are the system perof the stop.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
291
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Traction Control System (TCS)
Operating” for further information.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
293
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
maintain the desired path.
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
conditions.
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
WARNING!
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resultappropriate for the steering wheel position.
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atappropriate for the steering wheel position.
tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
others.
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP system has two available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
295
ESP on again, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will turn off.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF
switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn the ESP on again by momentarily pressPartial Off
ing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
vehicle is in motion.
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction IndiThe ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the
cator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
mode, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
• The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momencombined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
position.
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
• Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
position, the ESP system will be on even if it was
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
turned off previously.
running.
• The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicasounds when it is active. This is NORMAL; the sounds
tor Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
297
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING
299
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING
301
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
303
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
on your vehicle’s placard.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasTo determine the maximum loading conditions of your sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
calculated in Step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
305
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire over-heating and failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
307
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
temperature changes.
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING
309
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
WARNING!
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
75 mph (120 km/h).
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
on the vehicle at any given time.
vehicle at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING
311
WARNING!
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
to help you in determining when your tires should be
Life of Tire
replaced.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
313
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
SELF-SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner (120 km/h).
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in (5 mm) to
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob- Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
STARTING AND OPERATING
315
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
Tire Rotation
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
reversed.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
317
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
the tire.
or condition.
Base System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure.
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
• Receiver module,
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light. • Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
319
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when fault can occur due to any of the following:
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
the TPM sensors.
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system materials that may block radio wave signals.
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or Vehicles with Compact Spare
wheel housings.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
compact spare tire.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
321
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
STARTING AND OPERATING
323
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
5
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
the TPM sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains 15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
materials that may block radio wave signals.
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
flashing pressure value.
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
325
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following conditions:
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
pressure value.
operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses:
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.7L Engine
The 2.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
3.5L and 5.7L Engine
The 3.5L and 5.7L engine is designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89. The manufacturer recommends the use
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
327
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoProblems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proE85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
fuel system components.
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
methanol.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyE85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. OxygenNon-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containates are required in some areas of the country during the
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold driveability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
329
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
(Continued) NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If so equipped, use the finger pull
to open the door. Otherwise, push in on the left side (near
(Continued)
the edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
331
5
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
(Continued)
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
(Continued) If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
STARTING AND OPERATING
”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
333
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
information.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
VEHICLE LOADING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information • Type of Vehicle
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
335
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
GAWRs.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
tire pressure.
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
further information.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or teminformation.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
WARNING!
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
allowance for the presence of a driver.
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
337
Frontal Area
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying levermaximum width of the front of a trailer.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
Trailer Sway Control
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it proinstalled between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
swaying motions while traveling.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
Weight-Carrying Hitch
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium- Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
sized trailers.
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Max. Trailer Hitch
Class
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
The following chart provides the industry standard for All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can your vehicle.
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
STARTING AND OPERATING
339
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
2.7L & 3.5L Rear Wheel
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
Drive (RWD) Automatic
3.5L All Wheel Drive
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
(AWD) & 5.7L Automatic
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
341
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
343
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper
inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
spare tire.
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tire pressures and for proper − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
Towing Requirements – Tires
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
STARTING AND OPERATING
345
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
a lower gear range using the “3” range (if equipped) or
the AutoStick威/ERS feature (if equipped).
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
STARTING AND OPERATING
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
347
example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain
the desired speed.
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Cooling System
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
maximize fuel efficiency.
− City Driving
AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS) – If
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transEquipped
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− By using the AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS) − Highway Driving
mode and selecting a specific gear range, frequent Reduce speed.
shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should
be selected that allows for adequate performance. For − Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installation. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
Two-Wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground)
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
is allowed ONLY if the rear driveshaft is removed and
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (for both RWD and
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
AWD vehicles).
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . 352
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 368
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6
350
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
351
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
6
352
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
Opening The Access Panel
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
353
Jack Fastener
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
354
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations for Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
355
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
6
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
356
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
Center Cap Removal
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
357
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
6
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
Front Jacking Location
358
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with a center cap or
wheel cover, do not attempt to install it on the compact
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire spare. However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow
and install the spare tire.
the procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure.
Rear Jacking Location
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
359
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base • Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
pressure.
down the fastener.
• This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
6
360
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation — If
Equipped
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
361
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
1 — Valve Stem
4 — Wheel Cover
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
2 — Valve Notch
5 — Mounting Stud
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
service station.
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
6
362
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
force to install the center cap.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening precautions.
down the fastener.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
363
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
6
1 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2 — Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Battery Posts
364
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
365
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
charged battery.
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
366
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REvehicle.
VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinyou should have the battery and charging system in- ning the wheels, is most effective.
spected at your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
CAUTION!
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, information.
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
367
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
368
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the
rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL.
Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL under the following conditions:
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the
ground (or the rear driveshaft removed) with no limitation on speed or distance.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flatbed truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
369
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 376
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Front Side
Marker Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models
With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, Tail/Turn
Lamp, And Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped . . . . . 403
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 426
. . . . . . . 428
. . . . . . . 428
. . . . . . . 429
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
373
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Integrated Power Module
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Fill
— Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1
2
3
4
5
— Integrated Power Module
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
375
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Integrated Power Module
Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
377
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
379
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
attempting any procedure yourself.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
CAUTION!
penalties being assessed against you.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perWARNING!
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
You can be badly injured working on or around a
components or negatively impact vehicle performotor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
dealership or qualified repair center.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me(Continued)
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
7
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level – 2.7L and 3.5L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
381
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
fully warmed engine is shut off.
whichever occurs first.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.7L and 5.7L
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature temperatures.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informament” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tion.
tion.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiNOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
383
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added to Engine Oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
neered product and its performance may be impaired by service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
supplemental additives.
filter and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
WARNING!
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
recommended.
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Maintenance-Free Battery
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainnear the engine compartment before starting the tenance required.
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
serious personal injury.
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
385
WARNING!
Battery Location
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
387
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
7
388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down
and remove the used filter.
3. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
389
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
A/C Air Filter
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainteyear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
nance intervals.
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Body Lubrication
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as lock cylinder.
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
7
390
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
from a dry windshield.
residual water.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
performance of blades may be present with chattering, in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
391
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
7
392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
393
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
against you.
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe Cooling System
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
WARNING!
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica• When working near the radiator cooling fan, distions, should be obtained immediately.
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperaTo minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damture controlled and can start at any time the
age:
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
motion.
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
vehicle.
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
394
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
Selection of Coolant
leaks.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolWith the engine at normal operating temperature (but
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genunot running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
information.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
395
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
7
396
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze)
will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery
bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
397
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolDisposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal bottle need only be checked once a month.
7
398
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporproper corrosion protection of your engine, which
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
contains aluminum components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points to Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
399
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
WARNING!
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perBrake System
forming underhood services.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
system components should be inspected periodically.
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
7
402
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid and Filter Changes
Special Additives
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by suppleIf the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addifluid and filter should be changed.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
Selection of Lubricant
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- they may adversely affect seals.
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmisCAUTION!
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaDo not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainthe chemicals can damage your transmission compotained at the prescribed level using the recommended
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transVehicle Limited Warranty.
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
403
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informathe middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
tion.
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
Change Axle Fluid
hole.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Fluid Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuresistance built into your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
405
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
finish.
and open.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
406
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
ner:
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, • For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
407
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
protectants on Stain Repel products.
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
Interior Care
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiupholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
7
408
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
Glass Surfaces
with a clean damp rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial 2. Dry with a soft tissue.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Seat Belt Maintenance
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winDo not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
scratch the elements.
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
409
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Integrated Power Module
7
410
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity
1
Cartridge
Fuse
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—
7
—
8
—
MiniFuse
Description
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
30 Amp
Green
Washer Motor
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Ignition Run/Start
Alternator/EGR Solenoid
Diesel PCM – If
Equipped
Ignition Coils/Injectors/
Short Runner Valve
Headlamp Washer Relay
– If Equipped
Starter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
9
10
11
12
13
14
Cartridge
Fuse
—
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
—
—
Windshield Wiper
15
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves – If
Equipped
Radiator Fan
40 Amp —
Green
50 Amp —
Red
—
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor – If
Equipped
—
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Cartridge
Fuse
50 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
411
7
412
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Panel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity
1
2
3
4
CarMinitridge
Fuse
Fuse
60 Amp —
Yellow
40 Amp —
Green
—
—
40 Amp —
Green
413
Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear
Power Distribution
Center contains a black
IOD fuse needed for
vehicle processing during assembly. The service replacement part is
a 60 Amp yellow cartridge fuse.
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
7
414
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
—
7
8
—
—
5
9
—
10
11 *
12 *
—
—
—
MiniFuse
—
Description
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
—
—
15 Amp Diagnostic Link ConnecBlue
tor (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cavity
13 *
14
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
15
—
16
17
—
—
18
—
19
—
20
21
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/
Red
Cluster/Security Module – If Equipped
20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake ModYellow ule – If Equipped
—
—
20 Amp Cluster
Yellow
20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
Yellow
10 Amp Stop Lights
Red
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
28
—
29
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run, AC Heater
Control/Headlights/
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP) – If
Equipped/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)/
STOP LIGHT Switch
30
Cartridge
Fuse
—
31
32
33
34
35
—
—
—
—
—
36
—
37
—
5 Amp
Orange
MiniFuse
415
Description
10 Amp Door Modules/Power
Red
Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 Amp Antenna Module – If
Orange Equipped/Power Mirrors
20 Amp Hands-Free Phone – If
Yellow Equipped/Video Monitor – If Equipped/Radio
15 Amp Transmission
Blue
7
416
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
38
39
40
41
42
43
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp Cargo Light/Satellite
Red
Receiver (SDARS) Video
– If Equipped/Vehicle
Information Module – If
Equipped
—
10 Amp Heated Mirrors – If
Red
Equipped
—
5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview
Orange Mirror – If Equipped/
Heated Seats – If
Equipped/Switch Bank
—
—
—
30 Amp —
Front Blower Motor
Pink
30 Amp —
Rear Window Defroster
Pink
Cavity
44
CarMinitridge
Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp —
Blue
Description
Amplifier – If
Equipped/Sunroof – If
Equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch (if
equipped) are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in
Cavity 11. The passenger seat switch (if equipped) is
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The
door modules, the driver power window switch, and the
passenger power window switch are fused by the
25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If you experience
temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your
authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
417
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
Interior
Bulb Number
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
battery.
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder . . . . . . . . LED
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
7
418
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen) . . . . . . 9006
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp, and Front Side Marker Lamp —
Models with Halogen Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
419
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
7
420
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Park/Turn Lamp Bulb
4 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge Headlamps (HID)
421
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
an authorized dealer for service.
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
422
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, Tail/Turn Lamp,
and Tail/Stop Lamp
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
taillamp assembly.
1. Open the trunk.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the taillamp 6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
7. Pull the taillamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
423
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly.
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
1 — Backup Lamp Bulb
7
424
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Tail/Turn Lamp Bulb
4 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the
taillamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
425
11. Reinstall the taillamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
7
426
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
2.7 Liter Engine
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive
5.7 Liter Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
18
18
19
19
Gallons
Gallons
Gallons
Gallons
6.0 Quarts
6.0 Quarts
7.0 Quarts
Metric
68
68
72
72
Liters
Liters
Liters
Liters
5.7 Liters
5.7 Liters
6.6 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
9.9 Quarts
9.4 Liters
11.1 Quarts
10.5 Liters
11.4 Quarts
10.8 Liters
14.7 Quarts
13.9 Liters
15.1 Quarts
14.3 Liters
427
7
428
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 2.7L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.7L Engine
TE10MCC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine
ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection – 2.7L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.5L and
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
5.7L Engines
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
429
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use
only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic
Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40 or equivalent.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 434 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 432
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
432
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serNOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emisvice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
(805 km).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
433 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At Each Stop for Fuel
N
C
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance E
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your VeS
hicle” for further information.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichrequired.
ever comes first.
Once a Month
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
as required.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
434
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, add as needed.
CAUTION!
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
S • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
435 M
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All
Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
437 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
439 M
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
N ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
441 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
443 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
3.5L Engines).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
445 M
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
N ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (2.7L/3.5L Engines).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
447 M
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L
Engines).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All
Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
449 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 454
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 454
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
9
452
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
453
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
454
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 423–6343
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
ter should include the following information:
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
455
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-4852001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
456
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
457
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: for an order form.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
http://www.safercar.gov.
• Service Manuals
In Canada
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
information that students and professional technicians
should contact the Customer Service Department immeneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
458
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the The following tire grading categories were established by
assistance of service and engineering specialists to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
• Owner’s Manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
459
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
your vehicle.
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
mance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
Traction Grades
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
9
460
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
462
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 395
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 384
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,249
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,387
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,387
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 247,249,250,386
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,61
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,64,79,176
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,61
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 55,58,61
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,403
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,237
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,426
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,292
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 17
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 17
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
INDEX
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 180,189
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 250
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 270,276,401,402
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402,429
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,276
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,276
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . .
463
. . . . . 402
. . . . . 274
. . 275,278
. . . . . 280
. . . . . 429
. . . . . 429
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 24
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,79
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
10
464
INDEX
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399,429
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 77
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,417
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
330
382
286
396
404
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,330
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,246
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,69,72,74
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,203,207,216
INDEX
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 230
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 396
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,397
465
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 394,426,428
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,409
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
10
466
INDEX
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,248,254
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 242
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 409
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 144
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 174
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 186
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
INDEX
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 377,432
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,374,375
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,374,375
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,428
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,330
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
467
Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,426,428
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,189,381
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,426
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,330
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,391
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10
468
INDEX
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,387
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,428
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,137,175
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 428
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,178
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
INDEX
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,428
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,376
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
469
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,276
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,26,119,325
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,336
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,335
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
10
470
INDEX
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 137
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,142
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 149
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 140
INDEX
471
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,417
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,134
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,64,79,176
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,148
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
10
472
INDEX
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,137
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 296
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 174
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,178
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,421
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,142
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,177
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,173
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,148
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 185
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,148
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 139
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,148
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 185
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 182,315
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,136,137,175
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
INDEX
473
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 185,377
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,148
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 173
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,335
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10
474
INDEX
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,428
Mode
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,189,381
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,456
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,428
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,426
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,426
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,58,62
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,58,61 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,428 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,178 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,377
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,178 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,189 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,189 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INDEX
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,350
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,457
475
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 158
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 302
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 396
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
10
476
INDEX
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 244
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 180,189
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
INDEX
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,237
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,42,79
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 47
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,69,74
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
477
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 394,428
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10
478
INDEX
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,203,207,216
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,270,276
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,137,175
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,310,352
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,263
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,417
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,417
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
INDEX
479
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,306,458
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 52
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,354
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 250
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 174,351
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,303
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 302
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10
480
INDEX
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,306
Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 348
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,429
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,270,276,401
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,276
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
INDEX
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 149
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,178
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,40
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,175
481
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,333,335
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,417
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 17
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 230 Warning Lights
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10
482
INDEX
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,141,390
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,157
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,248,254
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,141
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Chrysler Group LLC
10D481-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.